2017 RAM 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual - Dealer E

2017 RAM 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual - Dealer E
2017
OWNER’S MANUAL
RAM TRUCK
1500/2500/3500
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
If applicable, refer to the Diesel Supplement for diesel
related information.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
INTRODUCTION 5
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S.
residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves,
refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on
these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed
by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be
supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the applicable
manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is
intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical support. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle,
the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) And Key Fob — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition And Key Fob — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Key Fobs — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Removing Key Fob From The (WIN) Ignition . . .15
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Replacement Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 ILLUMINATED APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Remote Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ To Lock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle)
— If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .28
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .41
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .30
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . . .35
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .92
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) system,
or a Keyless Push Button Ignition system.
2
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) And Key Fob — If
Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released
from the START position, the switch automatically returns
to the ON/RUN position.
Wireless Ignition Switch
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (Accessory)
— ON/RUN
— START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob
The key fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square
end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the
instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. The
WIN key fob also contains an emergency key which is
stored in the rear of the key fob.
Keyless Push Button Ignition And Key Fob — If
Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless
Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN
will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button, with your foot applied on the brake
pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
during start RUN will illuminate. It also contains the
Remote Keyless Entry key fob and an emergency key,
which stores in the rear of the key fob.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob
This Keyless Push Button Ignition key fob allows the driver
to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as
long as the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is in the
passenger compartment. The Keyless Push Button Ignition
has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three positions are
OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START,
Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fobs — If Equipped
The key fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square
end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the
instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also
contains the key fob and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at
the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then
pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Insert the key into the ignition and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security
system.
Emergency Key Removal
This Keyless Push Button Ignition key fob allows the driver
to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as
long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. The
Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions,
three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
The fourth position is START, during start RUN will
illuminate. It also contains the key fob and an emergency
key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the backside of the key fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Removing Key Fob From The (WIN) Ignition
2
NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to
your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be
triggered. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/
STOP button and push to disarm the security system.
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (WIN)
Key Fob Emergency Key
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the door lock cylinder with either side up.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission). Turn the key fob to the OFF
position and then remove the key fob.
NOTE:
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display⬙ in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the
vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from the vehicle,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
and lock all doors. If equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a
chime will sound to remind you to remove the key fob.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• ⬙Keyed⬙ Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC
when the driver door is open.
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
key fobs will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the key fobs while in this
condition, damage could occur to the key fobs or
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key for
locking and unlocking the doors.
• Leave the key fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
• The instrument cluster display will display “Key In
Ignition.”
CAUTION!
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
• “Keyless⬙ Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN
when the driver door is open.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins
to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used
an invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module,
Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to
crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition
in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will
turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Replacement Key Fobs
General Information
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the vehicle
security alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks
are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible
signals for the first three minutes. The horn will sound, the
headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash and vehicle security light will flash repeatedly.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and vehicle security light
flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the system
will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter- N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
To Arm The System
3. If any doors are open, close them.
For an additional 15 minutes only, the headlights will turn
on, the park lamps and/or turn signals, and vehicle
security light will flash.
Rearming Of The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
⬙OFF.⬙
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
⬙OFF⬙ and the key is physically removed from the
ignition.
The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the power
door locks, or use the key fob to lock the doors. After all the
doors are locked and closed, the vehicle security light, in
the instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the
alarm is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower
rate to indicate that the system is armed.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door
handle. If equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information.
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, push the Keyless Ignition START/STOP button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
key to the ON position.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED APPROACH
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on
the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position).
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate
horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the
far left detent position).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off by using the instrument cluster display controls (if NOT
equipped with a touchscreen radio) or the Uconnect radio
(if equipped with a touchscreen radio). Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Inserting the key fob with integrated key into the
ignition switch disables the system from responding to any
button pushes from that key fob. Driving at speeds 5 MPH
(8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding
to all key fob buttons for all key fobs.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as
well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob with integrated
key. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system. Push and release the lock button on
the key fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn
will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
WIN Key Fob With Integrated Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display/Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Passive Entry Key Fob
Remote Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door. Push the unlock button twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the
RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
NOTE: The instrument cluster display or Uconnect Settings are setup for driver door first, otherwise this will
unlock all doors.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
are inside the vehicle will activate the vehicle security
alarm system. Opening a door with the vehicle security
alarm system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push
the unlock button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm
system.
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display/Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn
signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display/Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle security alarm
system. Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm
system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the
unlock button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm
system.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, push and hold
the PANIC button on the key fob for at least one second
and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights
will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the turn signal lights will flash.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
greater.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
• The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
• All doors must be closed.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime. When vehicle
lowering is cancelled, the vehicle will raise up to the next
defined level and lock out the remote lowering feature
until the ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle)
— If Equipped
To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air suspension
lowering button one time during the lowering process.
When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the horn will chirp two
times and the turn signal lamps will flash four times. Once
raising is completed, the horn will chirp one time.
For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be
lowered by pushing the key fob air suspension
lowering button two times. When key fob lowering is requested, the vehicle will send a series
of chirps and flashes to alert the customer that the operation has begun and will continue these alerts until it
successfully lowers.
The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to
lower remotely:
• The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park)
ride height.
• The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
Cancelling Remote Lowering
NOTE: Refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal – if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the key
fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
Emergency WIN Key Removal
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Remove Screw From Key Fob Case
Separating WIN Key Fob Case
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Separating Key Fob Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in
step #2 for removal.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
• Hood closed
Remote Start Abort Message
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• PANIC button not pushed
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash,
vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine will
run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the vehicle security alarm system (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” in “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information on Remote Start Comfort System operation.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Door Lock Knob
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs
from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switches are on each front door trim
panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If
Equipped
Power Door Lock Switches Location
If you push the power door lock switch while the key fob
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking your key fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime
will sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and a door
is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,
refer to Settings/Customer-Programmable Features in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance
with local laws.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have
the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child Lock Control
WARNING!
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child Protection
Door Locks are engaged.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE:
NOTE:
• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
door lock switch to the unlock position, roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door
handle.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed by
pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons
(if equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have
been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the
vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the
vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs are
detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn
three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle).
2
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all doors.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle lock button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Power Window Switches
The power window controls located on the driver’s door
trim panel have up-down switches that give you fingertip
control of all power windows. There is a single opening
and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of the Quad Cab
and Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position,
and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or
until a front door is opened.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and release the
switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, push to the switch to the
first detent and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection (4-Door
Models Driver And Front Passenger Door Only) —
If Equipped
Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch (4–Door Models Only)
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the rear passenger
doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors, push the window lock switch into the latched or
down position. To enable the window controls, push the
window lock switch again and return the switch to the
released or up position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab, Mega Cab and
Crew Cab front center seating position have combination
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat,
and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped
with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat
is folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front
seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position on the seat.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
(Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows
Inserting Latch Plate
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
In Use Position
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide
the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate into its stowed position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued)
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the minilatch plate and mini-buckle.
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions —
If Equipped
Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
(Continued)
The center seating position for the Quad Cab, Mega Cab
and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the
lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and
pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear
the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in
the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
• ONLY use the Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature — If Equipped
This vehicle may be equipped with a seat belt system with
an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
2
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the
vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A
slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing
event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the
Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
2
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website
for
additional
information:
http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with a seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the belt correctly.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Crew/Mega Cabs 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Quad Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
Quad/Crew Cabs Full Bench LATCH Positions
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child reuntil the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH anchorchild and the child restraint is 65 lbs
age system to attach the child re(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
straint?
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
No
Do not use the seat belt when you
seat belt be used together to attach a
use the LATCH anchorage system to
rear-facing or forward-facing child
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
restraint?
child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the
No
Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench
center position using the inner
rear seat: Use the seat belt and tether
LATCH lower anchorages?
anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
Can two child restraints be attached
with two or more child restraints. If
using a common lower LATCH anchorage?
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of
touch the back of the front passenger
the front passenger seat if the child
seat?
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Regular Cab models have tether strap anchorages behind the front center and right seats.
Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab models
have tether strap anchorages located behind each
of the rear seats.
Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats
Driver Side
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Seat LATCH
Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No Lower
Center LATCH Anchorages Available
WARNING!
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Mega Cab Or Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center
LATCH Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to
hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt
path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is alseat?
lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Head restraints may not be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
Yes
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not
twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. For Crew, Mega, And Quad Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle,
you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible to keep
the child as far from the advanced passenger air bag as
possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch
Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckleend belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Regular And Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are
located behind the center and right passenger seats. In the
mega cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located
behind each rear seating position. There is a plastic cover
over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child
restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind
the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the
square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the
head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether
strap underneath the head restraint and between its
posts.
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap
loops located between the rear glass and the back of the
rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each
seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether
strap of the child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center
seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both
child seats should be connected to the center tether strap
loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat
and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the
head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the
seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the
right or left outboard seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the
tether strap following the directions for the center
seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
left tether straps before the center tether strap.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route
the tether straps following the directions for right and
left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do
not tighten the straps yet.
Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING! (Continued)
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
(Continued)
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” for further
information.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Defroster
Seat Belts
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using
• ALWAYS securely attach
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any
FROM THE VEHICLE
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .114
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .102
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .102
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . .117
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . .109
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And
Trailer Tow — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . .113
▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . . .120
▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . .121
▫ Mega Cab Rear Seat Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .128
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . .132
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . .134
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped .135
▫ Headlight Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped . . .141
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . .143
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .147
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
䡵 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .157
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .163
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .168
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .170
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . .171
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . .173
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .174
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . .179
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .184
䡵 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .185
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats) . . . . . . .185
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor Storage
Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Rear Cupholders — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .186
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . .190
▫ Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped.192
▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Storage (Regular Cab). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Storage and Seats (Crew Cab/Quad Cab) . . . . . .194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . .196
▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . .196
▫ Bed Extender — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Bed Rail Tie-Down System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
䡵 SLIDE-IN CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 EASY-OFF TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
䡵 FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .196
▫ Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote Keyless
Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
䡵 PICKUP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Removing The Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Cargo Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Locking Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
䡵 TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED . .216
䡵 RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins. . . . . .202
▫ Locking And Unlocking RamBox . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ RamBox Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . .226
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view
viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned On
or Off through the touchscreen.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature
On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable
if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are
connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network.
ASSIST Call
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
9-1-1 button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
Uconnect Access.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system
initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call
connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the cancellation button on the device
screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green
LED light on the rearview mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1
operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The rearview mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The device screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the rearview
mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X(voice/
data) or 3G(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a video
display illuminates to display the image generated by the
rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto
dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view
viewing.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect
radio. For further information, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex passenger side mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually
folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored
memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors in
Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Folding Mirror
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a car
wash or a narrow location.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the home position. If the mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area
which can cause excessive drag.
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To Reset The Power Folding Mirrors:
1. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror
to its full forward position.
2. Using the power folding mirror switch, move the mirror
to the full retract position (this may require multiple
button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
NOTE:
• The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while
the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds.
If you attempt to power fold the mirrors at high speeds
they may not fully open or close. You should slow down
to a moderate speed and complete the operation.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times
in one minute the system shuts down for one minute to
protect the motors from over heating.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch.
3
Power Mirror Controls
Power Mirror Controls Location
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Power Mirror Movement
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head
to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide
loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror
head should be rotated (flipped in or out).
NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and
can be adjusted separately.
Blindspot Mirror
Trailer Towing Position
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired position.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power
driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two
power seat switches that are used to control the movement
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
3
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
WARNING! (Continued)
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or
rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control
which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
(Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement
of the seat and seat cushion.
3
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support.
Lumbar Control Switch
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front
heated seats control buttons are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated seat button
setting on.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting on.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
heating elements off.
a third time to turn the
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s seat can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats
are located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator
lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-level
heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number
of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air
from the passenger compartment and move air through
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the
center instrument panel below the climate controls.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front
ventilated seats control buttons are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
the ventilated seat OFF.
Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
a second time to
a third time to turn
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Manual Seat Adjuster
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) —
Standard Cab
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to
swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This
“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind the
seat.
WARNING!
• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing forward and hit you causing injury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback and
actuate the handle, then position the seatback in the
desired position.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat
portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On
some models, the back of the center portion (20%) easily
folds down to provide an armrest/center storage compartment.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mega Cab Rear Seat Features
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle,
lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — If Equipped
Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold down either rear seatback:
1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
Table Mode Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward
when the seatback is folded flat.
WARNING!
Table Mode
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop or collision and strike
someone in the vehicle, causing serious injury or
death.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To fold either rear seat flat:
1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either of
the rear seats.
Rear Passenger Fold-Flat Seats
3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.
Folding Rear Seat Handle
2. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury
or death. Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback in not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Head Restraints
Front Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
(Continued)
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go.
Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints
Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable
head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint
and push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
and the release button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.
3
NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom
must be folded up.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab)
has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in
the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.
remote keyless entry key fob can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is
pushed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat cushion.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver’s seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your
Memory Seat Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals and radio
station presets).
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs to memory the
feature has to be selected.
3. Push and release the S (set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must
select the “Memory To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you
must select the “Key Fob Linked To Memory” feature
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
Memory Position Recall
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions.
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK,
a message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions on
how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
S (set) button on the memory switch, then push and
release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster
display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the S (set) button, and within 10
seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push memory button (1) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 1.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, push memory button (2) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
cancelled, the driver’s seat and the power pedals (if
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove the
key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position
is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or
RUN position.
• When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a
position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7
inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it,
before raising the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
LIGHTS
Safety Latch Location (1500 Series Shown)
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Headlight Switch Location
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be turned
off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect
radio. For further information refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel”.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the headlight position. When
the headlight switch is on, the parking lights,
taillights, license plate light and instrument
panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Automatic Headlight Position
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is also
on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90
seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except
PARK. This provides a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until
the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than
half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn
signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the
vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal
activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL
lamp will illuminate.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is turned off while the headlight switch
is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for further
information.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned
on or off using the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity
Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle the high beam
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
lever six full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition
ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition
off.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at
or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in
vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
To Activate
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
system.
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
Automatic High Beams are enabled through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the
Automatic High Beams are enabled through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn
off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Lights-On Reminder
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound when the
driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes
or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome
on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
on.
Fog Light Switch
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled off,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for
eight minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far right
detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote
Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed on the key
fob the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door
is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way left, to the off detent, will cause all the
interior lights to go out. This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙
mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the
ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer
control right (brighter) or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the
odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by
rotating the control to the right until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
dimming of the touchscreen is programmable through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further details.
3
Dimmer Control
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob, if equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding
lens.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Ambient Light
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor console area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
Ambient Light
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are turned on
by pushing on the cargo lights button.
Cargo Lights Button
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will also turn
on for approximately 60 seconds when a key fob unlock
button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn
on until the lever is released.
Turn Signal Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the
low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select the
desired wiper speed.
High/Low Beam Switch
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob into the
upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it
enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be
regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between
cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph
(16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper
will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is
released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer
knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed
while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located
on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first
detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and
automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate
this feature.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive.
Position 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O
(off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL
position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until
the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering
column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Tilt Steering Lever
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
This time may vary based on the temperature of the
surrounding environment or the heated steering wheel
may not turn on when it is already warm.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the heated
steering wheel control button is located within the climate
or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
the heating element On.
once to turn
• Press the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element Off.
a second time
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
(Continued)
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater
range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat
position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and
clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away from
the driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the
steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Speed Control System is on. The
following messages will appear on vehicles equipped
with an instrument cluster display if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out:
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged”
or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the
best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The cruise control indicator
light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
time. The cruise control indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Speed Control Switches
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To Deactivate
U.S. Speed (mph)
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Resume Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for further
information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn on indicating the system status.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arc
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than
79 inches (200
cm)
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-45 inches
45-31 inches
(200-115 cm)
(115-80 cm)
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
4th Solid
No
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The rear chime volume settings are programmable.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
31-18 inches
(80-45 cm)
Less than
18 inches (45 cm)
Slow
Fast
Continuous
3rd
Solid
Yes
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
Yes
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the
settings may be programmed through the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: The ParkSense system will automatically disable
when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes
has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module.
The instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
reverse.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
when the system is enabled.
If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is
disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
to appear, see an authorized dealer.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
appears in the instrument cluster display, see your authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will show ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 18 inches (45
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message to appear in the instrument cluster display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should
be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open
position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered
tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to
“ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this section for
limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47
inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows
one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 79
inches (200 cm)
WARNING ALERTS
79-45 inches
45-31 inches
(200-115 cm)
(115-80 cm)
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47
inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None
Slow (for rear
only)
Fast
Arcs
Radio Volume
Reduced
None
No
Single 1/2
Second Tone (for
rear only)
4th Solid
Yes
Less than 18
inches
(45 cm)
Less than 12
inches
(30 cm)
Continuous
3rd Solid
Yes
2nd Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
31-18 inches
(80-45 cm)
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are programmable.
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the
settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the
settings may be programmed through the instrument
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear
ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is
pushed to disable the system, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show the ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or
⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will
interrupt the five second messages, and the instrument
cluster display will show the vehicle graphic with the
corresponding arcs and ⬙OFF⬙ message.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the instrument cluster display will read “FRONT PARKSENSE
OFF” or “REAR PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off until
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
instrument cluster display will show the ⬙FRONT
PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or ⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with
⬙OFF⬙ in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic
will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 18 in (45 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be appear in the instrument
cluster display.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should
be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open
position. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
3
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is
put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through
⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ menu. Whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the image will be
displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or
Uconnect screen (if equipped) along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView Camera is located to the left of the tailgate
handle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
delay turned OFF), the rear Camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera
delay turned ON), the rear Camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless
the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is
switched to the OFF position.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ menu, a
display timer for the image is initiated. The image will
continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or
the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the Rear
View Camera image is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed
continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button
⬙X⬙.
If Equipped — Cargo Camera Icons:
•
— Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
•
— Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
to indicate the current active Camera image being
displayed is made available whenever the Rear View
Camera image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button
to switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made
available whenever the Rear View Camera image is
displayed.
A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. The
active guide lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: For further information about how to access and
change the programmable features of the ParkView Rear
Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zones
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of
the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning Rear View Camera Image On:
1. Press the ⬙Controls⬙ button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button
View Camera system on.
to turn the Rear
NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button, the
Rear View Camera image may be deactivated by pressing
the ⬙X⬙ button on the touchscreen. On deactivation, the
previous selected screen will appear.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is located on the headliner above the
review mirror. The overhead console contains the following features:
• Courtesy/Reading Lights
• Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights
• Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob, if equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding
lens.
Overhead Console
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink channels.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
HomeLink Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING! (Continued)
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
federal safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features. Call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before
you begin programming.
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The instrument
cluster display will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.”
Release the buttons when “CHANNELS CLEARED” appears on the display.
NOTE:
• For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place
the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and
close the door. The name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand - held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If “DID NOT TRAIN” appears in the Instrument
Cluster Display, repeat from Step 2.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). The instrument cluster display will
show “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door
opener/device activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand - held
transmitter button.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT
TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The
instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button while you push
and release (“cycle”), your hand - held transmitter every
two seconds.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument
cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both
buttons.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
instrument cluster display shows “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” Do not release the button.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.
• If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT
TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The
instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the
ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To erase the channels press and hold the two outside
HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
instrument cluster display will display “CLEARING
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the instrument
cluster display shows “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
3
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob
in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable, and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Sunroof Maintenance
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active in Accessory
Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the lock position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
and USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key
symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all
times.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
locations:
• Lower left and lower right of the center stack when
equipped with a bench seat.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR knob and
element must be used.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Power Outlets — Center Stack
1 — Power Outlet
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
• Center console when equipped with bucket seats.
• Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
— if equipped.
3
Power Outlet — Center Console
USB Port (Charge Only) — Upper Lid
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Rear of the center console storage compartment — Quad
Cab or Crew Cab.
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console Bin / USB
Port (Charge Only)
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All
accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable cigar lighter and ash receiver are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat, the cup holder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
Power Inverter Outlet
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The
outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch
type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary switches,
please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate
links.
CUPHOLDERS
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats)
There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the
lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be
used to power various electronic devices and PTO (Power
Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is equipped, it
will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary switch. Connections to the switches are found under the hood in the
connectors attached to the auxiliary Power Distribution
Center.
The cupholders are located on the backside of the center
portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section
of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of the
auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All
switches can now be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power source of either
battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Storage Bin
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats, two cupholders
are located next to the center console storage bin.
Rear Cupholders — If Equipped
Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located
in the center armrest.
Rear Armrest Cupholder
Front Cupholders For Bucket Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that
consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
Rear Cup Wells
Glove Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the upper glove compartment, push upward on
the handle release. The glove compartment door will
automatically open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Lower Glove Compartment
Upper Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Door Storage
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger rear door trim panels.
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
3
Rear Door Storage
Front Door Storage
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision. Only use the center seating
position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight
of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
These items could be thrown about endangering
occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not
exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise
the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB power
outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices,
refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further information.
Center Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
3
Upper Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Bin
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open
the lower storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console is equipped with a front storage bin
located next to the cupholders. This storage bin may be
equipped with a manual sliding top door.
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row
seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins
have removable liners that can be easily removed for
cleaning.
Front Storage Bin With Door — If Equipped
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of
the latch and open the lid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front
seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
3
Opened Storage Bin
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Storage and Seats (Crew Cab/Quad Cab)
The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide additional
storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the
storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the securing
snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward
on the fold flat lid.
Crew Cab Storage
NOTE: For more information on storage and the fold flat
floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles
are built into the back panel of the cab, behind the rear seat.
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, push
the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Grocery Bag Hooks
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Push this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on
the overhead console.
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock
to release the window.
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat
may be equipped with a folding load floor.
WARNING!
Rear Window Switch
Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or
sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may
move around with force and strike occupants, resulting
in serious or fatal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Unfolding The Load Floor/Quad Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
3
Unfolding The Load Floor
Load Floor In Open Position
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into
position.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
Quad Cab — If Equipped
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access Under
The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Quad Cab
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Crew Cab — If Equipped
Pick Up Box Features
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for utility and
convenience.
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must
use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available
from your authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood,
etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
box in the indentations provided above the wheel housings
and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
WARNING!
• The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials
are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo
and transfer the load to the pickup box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, supports
must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to
the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result.
The use of proper supports will permit loading up to
the rated payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to
side to create separate load compartments in the pickup
box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs
(450 kg) total.
Cargo Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that
allows you to see an image of the inside of the pickup box.
The image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of
the center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL).
to indicate the current active
A touchscreen button
camera image being displayed is made available whenever the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
Also, a touchscreen button
to switch the display to
rear view camera image is made available whenever the
Cargo Camera image is displayed.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera image
is displayed. The image will continue to be displayed until
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed
is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to
disable display of the Cargo Camera image is pressed.
NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Cargo Camera⬙ button, the
Cargo Camera image may be deactivated by pressing the
⬙X⬙ soft button. On deactivation, the previous selected
screen will appear.
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of three features:
• Integrated box side storage bins
NOTE:
• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Cargo Camera image will be displayed continuously
until the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the
Cargo Camera image is pressed.
• Cargo extender/divider
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) for 1500 series
vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles
of evenly distributed cargo.
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button
Camera system on.
to turn the Cargo
• Bed rail tie-down system
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push and
release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid will
open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully
open.
NOTE: RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is
pushed if the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg)
1500 series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and
3500 series vehicles per bin.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate
when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch located at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch
once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again
will turn the lights back on.
CAUTION! (Continued)
is required to stay open for extended periods of time, it
is recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addition
to other RamBox accessories) are available from MOPAR.
Locking And Unlocking RamBox
RamBox Light Switch
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid
(Continued)
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key fob
to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
(if equipped). Refer to “Remote Keyless Entry” for further
details. The RamBox storage bins can be locked using the
vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage bin, insert the
key into the keyhole on the push button and turn clockwise
to lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always return the
key to the upright (vertical) position before removing the
key from the push button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching/
hinging mechanisms.
• Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy/
sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle
motion. In order to minimize potential for damage,
secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect
inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with
appropriate padding.
• Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
• Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
• In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
RamBox Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
— If Equipped
Bed Extender — If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
• Storage Position
The bed extender has three functional positions:
• Divider Position
• Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
To install the bed extender into the storage position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
3
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
Storage Position
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends
to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.
Side Gates Closed
Cargo Tie Down Loop
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure
the panel into place.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
To install the bed extender into a divider position, perform
the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides
of the bed.
3
Aligning Gate To Slots
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends
are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed of the
truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an
additional 15 inches (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
additional cargo room is needed. The extender position
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both
sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.
Extender Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To install the bed extender into the extender position,
perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the
center handle vertically in order to release the extender
side gates.
3
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle.
Locking Tab
WARNING!
Extender Installation
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure
into place.
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property
damage:
• Cargo must be secured.
• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.
• Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.
• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg) load on the tailgate.
• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
(Continued)
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in
stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.
• When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.
Bed Rail Tie-Down System
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lbs
(113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that
can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull out
on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired
location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
3
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a #T30
Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the cleat
off the end of the rail.
Utility Rail End Cap
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Loading” document available from your authorized dealer. For
safety reasons, follow all instructions in this important
document.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) must be provided.
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or
Remote Keyless Entry, the electrical connector must be
disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote
Keyless Entry — If Equipped
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or Remote
Keyless Entry connector bracket located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pushing
inward in the locking tab.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent
damaging the connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Removing The Tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and
or power locks (if equipped), refer to “Disconnecting the
Rear Camera — If Equipped” in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove compartment) to the chassis wiring harness and
insert the bracket back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that
the terminals do not corrode.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The tailgate
can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking the truck
with the key fob if equipped with remote keyless entry.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau
Cover which consists of different features:
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
• Tonneau fore aft locator
Locking Tang
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
• Easy Tri-Fold cover
• Crosscar inside bed locator
• Front and rear clamps
• Stowage strap
• Locking Capability
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured
at the front of the box without removing completely.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamps on both driver and
passenger sides to the semi clamped position.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal
To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
3
1. Lower the tailgate to gain access to the first set of two
Tonneau Cover clamps located on the driver and passenger underside of the Tonneau Cover.
Semi Clamped Position
Clamped Position
NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up
into the proper released position.
Improper Clamp Wire Released Position
Proper Released Position
NOTE: Be sure the clamp and clamp wire is in the proper
released position.
CAUTION!
Make sure the tonneau cover clamp and clamp wire is
in the proper released position. If the clamp and clamp
wire is not properly released, damage to the tonneau
cover material will result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
4. Pick up on the tonneau cover and fold it back onto the
second panel.
7. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up
into the proper released position.
5. Pick up on the cover and fold it back onto the third
panel.
3
6. Once in the third panel position, pull down on the
second set of clamps on both driver and passenger sides
to the semi clamped position.
Proper Released Position
Semi Clamped Position
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Be sure to clip both stowage straps together to insure the
cover stays together.
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and
push the cover forward against the front of the truck
bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on
the vehicle.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release the
clamps from the stowed position.
Stowage Strap
9. With two people, remove the cover.
NOTE: Be sure the tonneau cover has been folded completely before removing.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:
Stowed Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or
flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped
position.
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
3
Clamped Position
Semi Clamped Position
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
Improper Clamp Position
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold Tonneau Cover to the intermediate position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
8. Pull down on the second set of clamp handles to release
the clamps from the stowed position.
3
Fully Unfolded Position
Stowed Position
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or
flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped
position.
Clamped Position
NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
Semi Clamped Position
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to
properly engage the clamps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
3
Improper Clamp Position
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the
clamped position by placing a lock through the locking
hole.
Locking Hole
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use MOPAR
Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPAR Leather &
Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .273
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . .234
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Controls . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Screens . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Oil Life Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . . .317
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ CD Player — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .319
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Climate Controls With a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1 — Headlight Switch
7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet
2
3
4
5
6
8 — Power Outlet — If Equipped
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Instrument Panel Drawer
11 — Climate Controls
12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter — If
Equipped
—
—
—
—
—
Instrument Cluster
Radio
Hazard Switch
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment
13 — Gear Selector/Transfer Case Position
Switch — If Equipped
14 — Ignition Switch
15 — Hood Release
16 — Parking Brake Release
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Clusters
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Clusters
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
• When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay
within the normal range if the battery is charged. If the
pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater
system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling
operation is controlled by the engine control module.
Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, and then
the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
3. Oil Pressure Gauge
• The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate
a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
4. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
6. Instrument Cluster Display
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
7. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
English
Metric
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion
of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake
Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped
below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until
the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
NOTE: Door Open Warning Light will differ depending on
the equipped instrument cluster display.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate
function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at
road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative.
The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Low Coolant Level Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Coolant Level Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.
Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the maximum payload may have been exceeded or load
leveling cannot be achieved at its current ride height. Protection Mode will automatically be selected in order to “protect” the air suspension system, air suspension adjustment is limited due to
payload.
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale Light
What It Means
Cargo Light
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo light button on
the headlight switch.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting. For further information, refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating”.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting. For further information, refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating”.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light
This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is changing to a higher ride height.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light
This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is changing to a lower ride height.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Suspension Ride Height: Entry/Exit
This light comes on when the vehicle is automatically lowered from ride height position downward for easy entry and exit of the vehicle.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4 Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
4 Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
2WD Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two-wheel drive mode.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped — Premium
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the speed control has been set.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
4WD AUTO Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and the front
axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel
Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped — Base
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when Hill Descent Control (HDC) has been selected using the Hill
Descent Control Switch. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
4
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of
the following:
Base Instrument Cluster Display
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Air Suspension (If Equipped)
• Audio
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Trailer Tow
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 &
8.4 radio)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following instrument cluster display control
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu items, submenu
screen, and vehicle settings.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• Left Arrow Button
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Push and release the left arrow button to access/
select the information screens, submenu screens
of a main menu item, or to return to the main
menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Instrument Cluster Display Screens
2. Temperature Display
Displays the outside temperature in degrees Celsius or
degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Main Screen
Displays main menu, submenus, settings.
4. White Telltales
5. Amber Telltales
6. Red Telltales
7. Audio/Phone Information And Submenu Information
Base Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display screens are located in the
center portion of the cluster and consists of seven sections:
1. Compass Display
Displays the current direction. Refer to “Compass Settings”
under “Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0/8.4 Settings” for further information.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The instrument cluster display screens are located in the
center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections:
10. Selectable Gauge 1 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,
Trailer Brake, Current fuel economy)
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
The instrument cluster display area will normally display
the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
2. Audio / Phone Information and Submenu Information
— Whenever there are submenus available, the position
within the submenus is shown here.
3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Trailer
Trip (distance only), Trailer Brake Gain, Time)
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Gear Selector Status
6. Selectable Menu Icons
7. Air Suspension Status – If Equipped
8. 4WD Status
9. Selectable Gauge 2 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,
Trailer Brake, Current Fuel Economy)
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the
messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long as
there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display’s compass/outside temp line.
Examples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal
Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
NOTE: Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is
in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to select
“Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “Reset”.
5. Push and release the down arrow button to select “Yes,”
then push and release the right arrow button to select
reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
“Vehicle Info” screen then scroll up or down to select
“Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “YES” by
pushing the right arrow then push and release the right
arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
5. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
cycle the display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. push and release the right arrow button to
enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. follow the
directional prompts to access or reset any of the following
Vehicle Info submenu items:
• Tire Pressure
• Air Suspension — If Equipped
• Coolant Temp — If Equipped
• Transmission Temp (Automatic only)
• Oil Temp
• Oil Pressure — If Equipped
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped
• Gauge Summary — If Equipped
• Engine Hours
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Fuel Economy
Air Suspension — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and Hold the right arrow button to
reset Average Fuel Economy.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Air
Suspension menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
display the Air Suspension status.
• Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Trailer Tow
• Average Fuel Economy Value
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button
and the next screen will display the following trailer trip
information:
• Range To Empty
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter
the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B
information will display the following:
• Distance
• Average fuel economy
• Elapsed Time
Push and hold right arrow button to reset all information.
• Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the right
arrow button to reset the distance.
• Trailer Brake
• Output
• Type
• Gain
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio display icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button to display
the active source.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages. Pushing the right arrow button will
allow you to see what the stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Vehicle Settings Menu Item
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the up and down button until Settings
displays in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following
Vehicle Settings.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
settings.
• If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle
Settings will be included in the instrument cluster display.
• If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio head unit.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
1
Language Select
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Language
2
3
Units
ParkSense
Units
ParkSense
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tilt Mirror in Reverse
Rain Sensing Wipers
Hill Start Assist
Headlights Off Delay
Illuminated Approach
Headlights On with
Wipers
Automatic Highbeams
Flash Lights with
Lock
Auto Lock Doors
Auto Unlock Doors
Tilt Mirror in R
Auto Wipers
Hill Start Assist
Lights Off Delay
Lights w/ Unlock
Lights w/ Wipers
English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Arabic (If Equipped)
U.S.; Metric
• Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display
• Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
• Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
On; Off
On; Off
On; Off
0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
On; Off
Auto Highbeams
Lights w/ Lock
On; Off
On; Off
Auto Lock Doors
Auto Unlock Doors
On; Off
On; Off
Setting Names
10
11
12
13
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Sound Horn with Remote Start
Sound Horn with Remote Lock
Remote Unlock Sequence
Key Fob Linked to
Memory
Passive Entry
Remote Start Comfort
System
Easy Exit Seat
Key-off Power Delay
Commercial Settings
Air Suspension Display Alerts
Aero Ride Height
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Horn w/ Rmt Start
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
On; Off
Horn w/ Rmt Lock
Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
Remote Unlock
Driver Door; All Doors
Key in Memory
On; Off
Passive Entry
Rmt Start Comfort
On; Off
Off; Remote Start; All starts
Easy Exit Seat
Power Off Delay
Commercial
Air Susp. Alerts
Aero Mode
On; Off
Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
• Aux Switches
• Power Take-Off
• PIN Setup
All; Warnings Only
On; Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Setting Names
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Mode
Tire/Jack Mode
Transport Mode
Wheel Alignment
Mode
Horn w/ Remote
Lower
Lights w/ Remote
Lower
Trailer Select
Brake Type
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
Tire/Jack Mode
Transport Mode
Wheel Alignment
On; Off
On; Off
On; Off
Horn w/ Rmt Lwr
On; Off
Lights w/ Rmt Lwr
On; Off
Trailer Select
Brake Type
Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
32
Trailer Name
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Trailer Name
33
34
35
36
Compass Variance
Calibrate Compass
Fuel Saver Display
Park Assist Front
Chime Volume
Compass Var
Compass Cal
Fuel Saver
Park Assist Front
Chime Volume
Setting Names
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
Boat
Car
Cargo
Dump
Equipment
Flatbed
Gooseneck
Horse
Livestock
Motorcycle
Snowmobile
Travel
Utility
5th Wheel
1-15 increments of 1
Cancel; Calibrate
On; Off
On; Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Setting Names
37
Park Assist Rear
Chime Volume
Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu
Layer)
Park Assist Rear Chime
Volume
Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)
On; Off
Turn Menu OFF — If Equipped
• Fuel Low
Push and release the right arrow button to exit the main
menu.
• Service Antilock Brake System
Push and release any instrument cluster display control
button to enter the instrument cluster display main menu
again.
• Service Power Steering
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
• Cruise Ready
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(S) “Inflate Tire To
XX”
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Battery Voltage Low
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Airbag System
• Lights On
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Turn Signal On
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock: Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
• Door Open
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Doors Open
• Key In Ignition
• Gear Not Available
• Key In Ignition Lights On
• Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Active Key To Run
• Shift To Neutral Then Drive Or Reverse
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait To Cool
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Transmission Cool Ready To Drive
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
• Service Transmission
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Service Shifter
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
• Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
• Washer Fluid Low
• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
• Service Air Suspension System
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And
Tire Change
• Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too Light
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
• Audio and Telematics System
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If
Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your Uconnect
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features. Many
features can vary by vehicle.
4
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 3.0 Power Hard Button
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Back
buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Personal Settings
Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) to display the settings menu screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights,
Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Settings, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped),
Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons
on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the list of available
settings.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until the
button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either
press the back arrow or the “Done” button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
Setting Name
Display Mode
Set Language
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available.
Selectable Options
Auto
Manual
English, Français, Español
NOTE:
If Arabic is selected as the vehicle language, the voice recognition and text messaging features will not function.
Touchscreen Beep
On
Off
Fuel Saver Display
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units — If Equipped
After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following
will be available:
Setting Name
Units
Selectable Options
US
Metric
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time
Selectable Options
12 hour
24 hour
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select
“AM” or “PM.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Setting Name
Set Date
Selectable Options
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
4
Selectable Options
Sounds and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and
the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects.
Front ParkSense Chime
Low
Med
High
Volume
Rear ParkSense Chime
Low
Med
High
Volume — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the
ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move
back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
Lights
4
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Headlight Illumination On Approach
Selectable Options
0
0
30
30
60
60
90
90
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Auto Dim High
Beams — If
Equipped
Flash Lights With
Lock
Selectable Options
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Setting Name
Auto Unlock On Exit
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Sound Horn With Lock
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
Remote Door Unlock
All
Driver
NOTE:
The “Remote Door Unlock” feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only
the “Driver door” with the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Sound Horn With Remote
On
Off
Start
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated.
Memory Linked To Fob —
On
Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
• The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Selectable Options
• The seat will return to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to (On) when the key fob is
used to unlock the door.
Passive Entry — If
On
Off
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
Flash Lights With Lock
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Setting Name
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
4
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Easy Exit Seats — If
Equipped
Headlight Off Delay
Engine Off Power
Delay
Selectable Options
0 sec
0 sec
Setting Name
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped
30 sec
45 sec
60 sec
5 min
90 sec
10 min
Selectable Options
On
Off
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sound Horn With Lower
Flash Lights With Lower
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
Selectable Options
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages
All
Warning Only
Automatic Aero Mode (1500 Model
On
Off
Only)
NOTE:
When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on
the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode
On
Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while
the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Setting Name
Transport Mode
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service. Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for
further information.
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Trailer Select
Trailer Brake Type
Trailer 1
Light Electric
Selectable Options
Trailer 2
Trailer 3
Heavy Electric
Light EOH
Trailer 4
Heavy EOH
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Selectable Options
Speaker Icon (Arrow Buttons)
C
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer
+
–
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted VolOff
1
2
ume
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound —
On
Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Setting Name
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Loudness — If
On
Off
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Variance
1
2
3
4
5
Selectable Options
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NOTE:
• Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the
compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Selectable Options
• Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Perform Compass CalibraOn
Off
tion
NOTE: Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree
turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start
Channel Skip
Selectable Options
On
Off
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the
“Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Selectable Options
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
Yes
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
Yes
Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your Authorized Dealer
for further information.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
8.4/8.4 NAV Personal Settings
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the settings
menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
to access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped),
Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore
Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen or
the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
Setting Name
Display Mode
Day
buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of
available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Selectable Options
Night
Auto
NOTE:
When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to
activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With
+
–
Headlights ON
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Setting Name
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
Pre-configured Themes
Set Language
English, Français, Español
NOTE:
Arabic is available for the navigation system (if equipped) only.
Touchscreen Beep
Navigation Turn-By-Turn
In Cluster — If Equipped
Controls Screen Time-Out
— If Equipped
Fuel Saver Display — If
Equipped
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Units — If Equipped
After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following
will be available:
Setting Name
Units
Selectable Options
US
Metric
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sync Time With GPS — If
Equipped
Set Time Hours
Selectable Options
+
–
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Setting Name
Set Time Minutes
Time Format
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
+
12hrs
–
24hrs
4
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkSense
Sound Only
Selectable Options
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Front ParkSense Chime
Volume
Rear ParkSense Chime
Volume
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Low
Selectable Options
Med
High
Low
Med
High
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when
the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of
the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear License plate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see Active (Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with
a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera
On
Off
Delay
NOTE:
When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to
remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (12 km/h).
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
On
Off
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
Setting Name
Two Or Four Corner Air
Suspension Modes — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Tire Jack Mode
Off
Selectable Options
Transport Mode
Wheel Alignment
Mode
Protection Mode
NOTE:
There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in
changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is
selected before performing a wheel alignment, refer to your authorized dealer for information. Protection Mode will automatically
be selected to “protect” the air suspension system when the payload has been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Setting Name
Headlight Illumination On Approach
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0,
30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under
certain conditions.
Flash Lights With Lock
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are
locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Setting Name
Sound Horn With Lock
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Off
Driver Door
Selectable Options
1st Press
2nd Press
All Doors
NOTE:
• When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press
of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
• When “All Doors” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
• If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed,
only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
• With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than
once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Personal Settings Linked
To Key Fob — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
• The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver
mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
• The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when
the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
Selectable Options
4
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is
shut off.
Setting Name
Engine Off Power Delay
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
+
–
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30,
60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sound Horn With Lower
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Lower” feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the key fob remote
lower button is pressed.
Flash Lights With Lower
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lower” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the key fob
remote lower button is pressed twice. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lower feature
selected.
Suspension Display Messages
All
Warning
Automatic Aero Mode (1500 Model
Only)
NOTE:
When the “Automatic Aero Mode” feature is selected, the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on
the vehicle speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Setting Name
Tire Jack Mode
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare
tire.
Transport Mode
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat
bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to your authorized
dealer for further information.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Brake
After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Trailer Select
Trailer Brake Type
Trailer 1
Light Electric
Selectable Options
Trailer 2
Trailer 3
Heavy Electric
Light EOH
Trailer 4
Heavy EOH
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Selectable Options
Speaker Icon (Arrow Buttons)
C
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or
use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer
+
–
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Setting Name
Speed Adjusted Volume
Selectable Options
OFF
1
2
3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound —
On
Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset
On
— If Equipped
Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Settings
After pressing the “Phone Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Do Not Disturb
Selectable Options
List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Sources
List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start
Selectable Options
On
Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Setting Name
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version.
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Radio 3.0, Uconnect
3.0, Uconnect 5.0, or Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV radio, refer to
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
iPod control supports the following: iPod/iPod classic,
iPod mini, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, iPod touch, and iPhone
devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s website
for software updates.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
1 — USB Port
2— Aux Jack
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the back
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio
sources.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control will
tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed
in the radio pre-set buttons.
Remote Sound System Controls (Rearview Of Steering
Wheel)
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
CD Player — If Equipped
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track. If you push the switch up or down three
times, it will play the third, etc.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
off during mobile device operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
Regulatory And Safety Information
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
USA/CANADA
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 centimeters) or further from
the human body.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
help.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, airflow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen —
If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be
set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Setting
Rotate the Temperature Control Knob counterclockwise until it is set to MAX A/C. This is the
coldest setting and will put the A/C to its maximum power.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Icon
Description
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost setting is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates
cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control knob to regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Description
Modes Control: Rotate the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate
the temperature control knob to the desired temperature.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
modes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Controls With a Touchscreen
5.0 With Automatic Temperature Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
4
8.4/8.4 NAV With Manual Temperature Controls
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8.4/8.4 NAV With Automatic Temperature Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Control Descriptions
NOTE: Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle
equipment.
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate,
to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Description
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature
is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate,
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Icon
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4
Description
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons — If Equipped
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow
button on the faceplate, press the up arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the down arrow button on the faceplate, press the down arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen
for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature
will move up and down with the driver’s temperature, when it is increased and decreased, respectively.
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the
rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Description
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Icon
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the faceplate button, to turn the Climate Control System off.
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do
not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels
can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Control Functions
MAX A/C
A/C (Air Conditioning)
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation Override
Winter Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedure” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air
with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on
the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the
front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When
this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system has a cabin air filter that filters
out dust and pollen from the air. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 3.0, 5.0 or
8.4/8.4 NAV system.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Uconnect 3.0
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect
8.4 system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
4
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the
headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect
system with your voice.
Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the screen.
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 3.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
4
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV
Radio
Uconnect 3.0 Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
4
TIP: For the Uconnect 3.0, Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV
systems, select Browse to see all of the music on your iPod
or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song and genre information is
displayed.
Uconnect 3.0 Media
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Media
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated for
the Uconnect 3.0, Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV radios,
your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
. After the beep, say one of the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
4
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
Uconnect 3.0 Phone
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
and say Listen. (Must have compatible
Phone button
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
Start without
No.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
Are you there
Call me.
yet?
I need
I’ll call you later.
directions.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
RESPONSES
See you later.
I’ll be late.
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this
feature.
For
details
about
MAP,
visit
UconnectPhone.com.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
Turn On “Show Notifications”
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
command will not work to adjust the heated seat, vented
seat, or the steering wheel, if equipped.
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation
at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say:
. After the
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
. After
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on
the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Vehicle Finder
Send ‘N Go
Yelp Search
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Assist Button
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send ‘n Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App::
• Once you have registered your Uconnect Access services, download the Uconnect Access app to your mobile device. Use your Owner Account login and password to open the app.
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
TIP:
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
, then say: “YELP search.”
push the VR button
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
Turn On “Show Notifications”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Yelp
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
SiriusXM Travel Link
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
other useful requests.
Siri Eyes Free Available
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
4
Siri Enable Screens
1 — Select Settings On Your
iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure.
Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: A push and release of the
button will start
normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
button will start Siri functions.
then release of the
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Siri Eyes Free
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Do Not Disturb
NOTE:
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Automatic reply messages can be:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models
Only (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500
Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) .369
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped . .398
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position
Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .371
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .373
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position
Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
䡵 AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED). . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
䡵 STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS ONLY)
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
䡵 SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand. . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Hill Climbing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Driving Through Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ After Driving Off-Road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
䡵 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
▫ Traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only
(Except Power Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ After Driving Off-Road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
䡵 WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY (IF
EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .479
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). . . . . .479
▫ Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . . . .459
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Understanding The Features Of Your Winch . . . .461
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Winch Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Operating Your Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . .484
䡵 POWER STEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models . . . . . . .475
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped . . . .489
▫ Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models .475
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . . .489
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . .513
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Directional Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .497
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . .504
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .516
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500 Series
Trucks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .524
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .525
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Towing Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
䡵 SNOWPLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ 1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ 2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .553
▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second
intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals
will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained
without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Cycle
the ignition to the START position and release when the
engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
cycle the ignition to the OFF position, wait five seconds,
then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position.
Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Normal Starting
• This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift
out of PARK.
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
• If equipped with an 8 speed transmission starting the
vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual
Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park
Release operation refer to Manual Park Release in “What
To Do In Emergencies”.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run and will automatically disengage when the engine is running.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice
to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
Idle Shutdown — 6.4L Engine Only
This feature can be enabled so that the truck will automatically shutdown when the truck has been idling for a set
period of time when the engine is at operating temperature. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments between 5
and 60 minutes. See your local authorized dealer to enable
this feature.
NOTE: The idle shut down timer is disabled while the PTO
is active.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. To
change the ignition switch positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change
the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! (Continued)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the ignition
button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking
with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.
Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key
once the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second
period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
1500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp
assembly. It is located between the front grill and the
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.
2500/3500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by
the right front tow hook.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the winter months. During winter months,
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the
c-clip.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the
ignition is in the OFF mode) the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature
is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
the ON/RUN mode (engine running, for vehicles with
eight-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must be
pressed.
In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the instrument panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must press the
brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
Park to Drive), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can
be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙
in this section for further information). Pressing the
GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering wheel) while in
the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit in the
instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear,
while in ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
When exiting the vehicle, always:
WARNING! (Continued)
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
(Continued)
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the
ignition is in the OFF mode), the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into PARK:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
DRIVE (D)
Transmission Limp Home Mode
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to
⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. On vehicles with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ignition switch
until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
Eight-Speed Transmission
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in
DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR- switch
(on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as
the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the
GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change the top available
gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
5
1 — GEAR - Switch
2 — GEAR + Switch
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+
switch until the gear limit display disappears from the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
TOW/HAUL Switch
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models
Only (If Equipped)
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
The gear selector is mounted either on the right side of the
steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if
equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission
Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the
gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting
into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK
(column shift only).
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation”
in this section for further information). Pressing the ERS
(-/+) switches (column shift) or moving the gear selector to
the left or right (-/+) (console shift) while in the DRIVE
position will select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as
1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display both the selected gear
limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
5
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the
ignition is in the OFF mode), the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted
gear selector toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted
shifter, firmly move the gear selector all the way forward
and to the left until it stops.
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
CAUTION!
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct
third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
To access all six available gears, you must use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described below.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information) to select
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when
climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped
in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter
clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
Six-Speed Transmission (1500 Models Only)
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during
through-gear accelerations. This additional gear can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability when
towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode, gears 1
though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct drive.
ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the normal
fourth and fifth gears.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch
(column shift) or tapping the gear selector to the left (-)
(console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE and are in
third (direct) gear, when you tap the gear selector/switch
one time in the (-) direction, the display will show 4 (ERS
4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-) will shift the
transmission down to ERS 3 (the added underdrive gear).
Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top
available gear.
Column Gear Selector
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
gear selector to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-)
switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descending
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed.
Console Gear Selector
To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector to the right
(+) (console shift) or press and hold the ERS (+) switch
(column shift) until the gear limit display disappears from
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmission
will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following
conditions are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position,
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate
temperature,
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high,
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated, and
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneuvers.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
top gear is disabled, and the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently
warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to
shift into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
partially draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500
Models Only
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the
steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move
the gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section for
further information). To drive, move the gear selector from
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the gear
selector toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK,
or when shifting out of PARK.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation”
in this section for further information). Pressing the ERS
(-/+) switches (on the gear selector) while in the DRIVE
position will select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as
1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display both the selected gear
limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the
ignition is in the OFF mode), the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector toward
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
stops.
• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
(Continued)
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
NEUTRAL (N)
DRIVE (D)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through underdrive first, second, and third gears,
direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics
under all normal operating conditions.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information) to select
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when
climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped
in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter
clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only.
Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the
top available gear.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
5
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not
shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch
Column Gear Selector
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS (+) switch
until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument
cluster.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the
ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range
from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descending
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transmission
will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following
conditions are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs,
push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneuvers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle
to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
Torque Converter Clutch
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after
1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because sixth gear is
disabled, and engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into
and out of Overdrive.
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid
partially draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
NEUTRAL (N)
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further information.
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
• Neutral (N)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
4H
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such as
dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the
gear selector to the desired positions once the appropriate
speed and gear requirements are met, refer to “Shifting
Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case” in this section
for further information.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in
four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. This light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There is no
light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions on some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at
a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine
and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause
damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
2H To 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can
be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
2H Or 4H To 4L
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or occupants.
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case
lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
NOTE:
• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission may require shutting the
engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the
shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, hold your foot on the brake, and turn the
engine OFF. Complete the range shift to the desired
mode.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position
Switch) — If Equipped
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD
Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on
the instrument panel.
5
• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
• Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is
fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
Four-Position/Part Time Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
control switch back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a
shift: return the control switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the
control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch
must be in the ON position with the engine either running
or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch
is in the ACC position.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position
indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
Alternate Procedure
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch
to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift,
then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position
Switch) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
2WD
NEUTRAL (N)
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or fourwheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW,
and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
control switch back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
WARNING!
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a
shift: return the control switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can
be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage
faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine
either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front
and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this
time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Preferred Procedure
NOTE:
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the 4WD control switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — Eight Speed
Transmission Only
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads).
Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
pushing the desired position on the 4WD control switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To
find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙
for your transfer case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
WARNING!
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD LOCK
Push the desired position on the 4WD control switch to
shift the transfercase. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK
can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after selecting the desired position on the control
switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition must be in the
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
ON position with the engine either running or off. This
shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the
ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position
indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the
transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four–wheel drive system
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — Eight Speed
Transmission Only
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode
positions:
• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or fourwheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD
mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
pushing the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific
shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW,
and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are
Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To
find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙
for your transfer case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury or death.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
• You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
Push the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch to
shift the transfer case. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD
AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after selecting the desired position on the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position
with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot be
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front
and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this
time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the
transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED
Description
The air suspension system provides full time load leveling
capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust
vehicle height by the push of a button.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
Air Suspension Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up Button
Down Button
Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)
NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode
when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100
km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds
or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1
in [26 mm]) – This position should be the primary
position for all off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2) is
needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will
result. To enter OR1, push the “Up” button once from
the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below
35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the
vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle
will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may
not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument
cluster message will be displayed when this occurs.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2
in [51 mm]) – This position is intended for off-roading
use only where maximum ground clearance is required.
To enter OR2, push the “Up” button twice from the NRH
position or once from the OR1 position while vehicle
speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
height will be automatically lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2
may not be available due to vehicle payload, an instrument cluster message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting,
be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the
clearance required for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in [15
mm]) – This position provides improved aerodynamics
by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically
enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from
Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20
seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph
(48 km/h).
NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display when
equipped with Uconnect 3.0, or your Uconnect Radio when
equipped with Uconnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 2
in [51 mm]) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier
passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of
the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To
enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down” button once
from the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the
vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit
change will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height
Mode, push the “Up” button once while in Entry/Exit or
drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit
mode may not be available due to vehicle payload, an
instrument cluster message will be displayed when this
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
occurs. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your key
fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to “A Word About Your
Keys” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
CAUTION!
When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the clearance required for
certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN
position or the engine running for all user requested
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must
be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle
is lowering the change will not be completed until the open
door(s) is closed.
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which
keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle
will move up first and then the front. When lowering the
vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air
suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a
proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to
be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done through
the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
dealer for service.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Air Suspension Modes
Transport Mode
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic
load leveling system. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio for further
information.
AERO Mode
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system has a
feature which will put the vehicle into AERO height
automatically. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
a touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
a touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Protection Strategy
Operation
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
will disable load leveling as required (suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as system operation requirements
are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not
resume.
5
NOTE: If towing with air suspension refer to “Trailer
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
See your authorized dealer for system service if normal
operation does not resume.
Air Suspension Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Up Button
Down Button
Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the
current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps
will show a position which the system is working to
achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the “Up” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, speed below threshold, etc). The “Up” button can
be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of
OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current
conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The
“DOWN” button can be pushed multiple times, each push
will lower the requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed,
etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
and instrument cluster display messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH)/Aero Mode – Indicator
lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
this position.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated
when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit
mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicator lamp
3 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at
which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS
ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
5
Description
The air suspension system provides full time load leveling
capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust
vehicle height by the push of a button.
Air Suspension Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Up Button
— Down Button
— Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
— Aero Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
— Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
— Off-Road Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode
when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph
(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20
seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
• Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1 in
[26 mm]) – This position is intended for off-roading use
only where maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR, push the “Up” button once from the NRH
position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
While in OR, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically
lowered to NRH. Off-Road may not be available due to
vehicle payload, an instrument cluster display message
will be shown when this occurs. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware of your
surroundings, you may not have the clearance required
for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in [15
mm]) – This position provides improved aerodynamics
by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically
enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from
Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20
seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph
(48 km/h).
NOTE: Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only apply
if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.
• To enter Aero Mode manually push the down button
once from NRH at any vehicle speed. To return to NRH
push the up button once while vehicle speed is less than
56 mph (90 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
vehicle settings on your Uconnect Radio when equipped
with UConnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 3
in [73 mm]) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier
passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of
the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To
enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down” button twice
from the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph
(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the
vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit
change will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height
Mode, push the “Up” button twice while in Entry/Exit
or drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit
mode may not be available due to vehicle payload, an
instrument cluster display message will be shown when
this occurs. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the clearance required for
certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN
position or the engine running for all user requested
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must
be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle
is lowering the change will not be completed until the open
door(s) is closed.
This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which
keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle
will move up first and then the front. When lowering the
vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air
suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a
proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
be disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done through
the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
a touch screen radio for further information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
dealer for service.
Air Suspension Modes
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
AERO Mode
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension system has a
feature which will put the vehicle into AERO height
automatically. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tire/Jack Mode
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic
load leveling system. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio for further
information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Wheel Alignment Mode
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
a touch screen radio for further information.
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
will disable load leveling as required (suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as system operation requirements
are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not
resume.
NOTE: If towing with air suspension refer to “Trailer
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
Operation
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the
current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps
will show a position which the system is working to
achieve. When raising or lowering, the flashing indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the “Up” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, speed below threshold, etc). The “Up” button can
be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of
OR or the highest position allowed based on current
conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 will flash and indicator lamp
4 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at
which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine
running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The
“DOWN” button can be pushed multiple times, each push
will lower the requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed,
etc.)
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
and instrument cluster display messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle.
• Off-Road (OR) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) —
IF EQUIPPED
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5
will be illuminated when the vehicle is in NRH.
Description
• Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated
when the vehicle is in Aero Mode.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated
when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit
mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height
system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain the
truck’s rear ride height level. There are two selectable
heights that can be chosen based on your operating conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN
position or the engine running with zero vehicle speed for
all user requested changes and load leveling.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading - The air suspension system will load level (lower/exhaust only) for up to 10
minutes after the vehicle is turned off. This allows for easy
removal of a trailer and/or load from the back of the truck
by maintaining the ride height. After 10 minutes you will
need to turn the ignition to the run position for the air
suspension to maintain ride height. If the air suspension
system is disabled using the settings menu (Tire Jack Mode,
Transport Mode or Alignment Mode) the system will
remain disabled when the vehicle is turned off. Reactivating the air suspension can be accomplished via the settings
menu or driving the vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire
Jack Mode or Alignment Mode and 16 mph (26 km/h) for
Transport Mode.
NOTE:
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard position
of the suspension and is meant for normal driving. It will
automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride height as
conditions change.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle
approximately 1 in (25 mm) for a level truck, to be used as
required while trailer towing. It will automatically adjust
to maintain the rear ride height as conditions change.
• Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) when unloaded.
• Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Ignition OFF Behavior
For a predetermined amount of time after the ignition is off
the air suspension may adjust to maintain a proper appearance.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
dealer for service.
Air Suspension Modes
The air suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
a touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
vehicle below Normal Ride Height (NRH) and disable the
automatic load leveling system. This mode is intended to
be enabled with engine running. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio
for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with
a touch screen radio for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle
will disable load leveling as required (suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as system operation requirements
are met. See your authorized dealer if system does not
resume.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
See your authorized dealer for system service if normal
operation does not resume.
Operation
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button once
while at Normal Ride Height (NRH), will lower the vehicle
to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will illuminate the
LED.
NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until vehicle
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved and the
LED will turn off.
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again will raise
the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride
Height (NRH) has been achieved.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front
and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only
be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the
ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with
the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced
ability to turn and speed limitations.
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles
are locked on hard surfaced roads.
• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck
and the tires are spinning. You can damage drivetrain
components. Lock the rear axle before attempting
situations or navigating terrain, which could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.
The switch has three positions:
• AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are unlocked
• REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked
• FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles are
locked
Under normal driving conditions, the switch should be left
in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
Axle Lock Selector
CAUTION!
• Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and
(Continued)
NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still
provides torque biasing capability for moderate low traction environments.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
solid.
To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front
axle is locked.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to
“Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Move the axle locker switch
position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the
rear axle is locked.
NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front axle
will lock.
NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is
flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or
FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn
or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action.
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving.
A locked front axle is intended for off-road driving
only. Locking the front axle during on-road driving
will reduce the steering ability. This could cause a
collision and you may be seriously injured.
To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light
will go out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side
to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while turning the
steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or
driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required
to release the torque lock and unlock the axles.
To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to
AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go
out when the rear axle is unlocked.
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm) in
the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major
advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it
has on approach/departure and break over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar
switch located on the instrument panel.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard
surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h),
you may lose control of the vehicle, which could result
in serious injury or death. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists in maintaining
control of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar
at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing off road light and solid on road light. Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the
system will attempt to return to the Off-Road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI or
4LO as shown in “Four Wheel Drive Operation” and push
the right hand Off Road stabilizer/sway bar button to
obtain the Off-Road position. The amber indicator light
will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
disconnected.
Sway Bar Disconnect Buttons
The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road. The
system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated by a
solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
the On-Road mode during normal driving conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading.
In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/
reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be
aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be
driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to the On-Road mode; push the left hand On
Road stabilizer/sway bar button.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
mode, vehicle stability is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster
than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control of the
vehicle, which could result in serious injury or death.
Contact your local service center for assistance.
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.
These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore those
wilderness trails where few travel, providing a source of
exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you venture out,
you should contact your local governmental agency to
determine the designated off-road vehicle (ORV) trails or
recreation areas. You should always tread lightly and only
use established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas.
The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management,
or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of
information and usually have maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of
the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and steering
damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with boxed
cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road
situations that would be considered impassable by a normal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you
can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp
without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the
vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
an RTI of 510, which means you can articulate one front
wheel 26 inches (66 cm) in the air while the other three
wheels remain in contact with the ground.
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to cross
a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain
are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water
fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of
water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a
maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water
30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm). Water may
intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so
always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain
a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns
or braking. In most cases there are no road signs, posted
speed limits or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use
your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn’t.
When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for
surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle exhaust
system could cause a fire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4LO (Low Range) for
additional traction or to improve handling and control on
slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low
range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power
range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down
hills, with improved control and less effort. Also, use 4LO
(Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get heavy
loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4HI (High
Range) traction will not do the job.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4LO (Low Range) if
necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a
stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a ¼
turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle.
This will allow the tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help
maintain your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
• Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around
the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should
use 4LO (Low Range) with a gear low enough to
maintain your momentum without shifting. If you start
to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no
more than a ¼ turn quickly back and forth for additional
traction. Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle
damage and getting stuck. They are normally full of
debris from previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
practice before entering any mud hole, get out and
determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden
obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if
stuck.
• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with
full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a
trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not
stop. The key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt
maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If
you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or
dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi
(103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and
handling, while driving on the soft sand, but you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on
pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a
way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the
pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it
makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly
while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of your
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Using A Spotter
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or
determine the correct path. Determining the correct path
can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many
obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a
safe distance in front of you where they can see the
obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide
you through.
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree
angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing large
obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any
large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to
put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a
rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree
angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill
the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should
now be able to drive out following the trench you just
created at a 45-degree angle.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This will
lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the
tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Logs
CAUTION!
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of
the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high centered.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the
best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what
you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point
when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to
climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel
confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should
always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
climb a hill on an angle.
• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill
consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too
steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side
trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or
other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the
vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks
good and you feel confident, then change transmission
into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4LO (Low)
and proceed with caution. You should use first gear and
4LO (Low Range) for very steep hills.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
• Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your ability
to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line
your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate
with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you
start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade, the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly
to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed
over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway
by turning the steering wheel no more than a ¼ turn quickly
back and forth. This will provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the
surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the
vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a roll over, which may result in severe injury
or death.
• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to
maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there obstacles?
Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the
base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends
too fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed
then make sure you are in 4LO (Low Range) with the
transmission in first gear (manually select first gear on
automatic transmissions) and proceed with caution.
Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply
your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to
lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places more
weight on the down hill wheels, which increases the
possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make sure
the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils.
If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading
slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall or
begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow
your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply
the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression
braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across
a hill, always drive straight up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be
attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
to the environment. You should know your vehicle’s
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air
intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it.
Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any
crossing is low and slow. You want to use first gear in 4L
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
(Low Range) and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light throttle.
Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the
bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of
the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you
can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out
and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters,
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be
intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the
water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft
bottoms the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing
the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this
when determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy
waters. These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate
water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition.
Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to
hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a
faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are able
to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using
the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or
river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can
easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of
control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can
still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting
you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high
risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower
water currents in depths greater than the vehicle’s
running ground clearance. You should never attempt to
cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle’s
running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can
push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of control if
the water is deep enough to push on the large surface
area of the vehicle’s body. Before you proceed determine
the speed of the current, the water’s depth, approach
angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles,
then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using
the low and slow technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at risk
of injury or drowning.
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form
to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and vehicles
require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and
heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will need to
experiment to determine what is right for your situation. It
is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so,
start high and lower it as required. Remember you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on
road or at highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to
return the tires to their normal on road air pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage
and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at
a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Vehicle Recovery
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation where
you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle recovery
should always be given consideration before attempting a
questionable obstacle. You should never go off-road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a
situation. Having another vehicle with you usually works
best for most situations. The first thing to do is assess the
situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on
something? Would it be easier to go forward or to go
backward? Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an
anchor point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have
another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of vehicle
damage during the recovery process? Answering these
questions will help you determine the best method of
recovery. If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the
only issue is slick ground, then rock cycling your vehicle
would be the first choice. If you have ample room, an
additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the
vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is
severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs
to be taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on
something you should jack the vehicle up and stack
something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off
the object without causing further damage. This should be
tried before attempting any recovery method.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first clearing the object, may result in additional underbody
damage.
• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle
is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly used
methods. This simply involves shifting your vehicle
from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying throttle after
each shift. During this process, for additional traction,
try turning your steering wheel quickly left and right no
more than a ¼ turn. If you are stuck in mud, sand, or
snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
the debris from the tread and improve the traction. You
want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle. This
helps build vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets
you out. Remember to ease off and on the accelerator
before and after the shift. If after a few rock cycles your
vehicle is not free, stop and try another method of
recovery. Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster than
an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow straps
are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from
minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which
is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed
to take the abusive force generated during vehicle
recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle
component as an attachment point. Using tow straps
requires coordination between the two drivers. Good
communication and line of sight are required for a safe
recovery. First connect the tow strap to the correct
attachment points on both vehicles. There should be a
least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between the vehicles to
allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join two tow straps
together using a 1 ½ inch hard wood dowel. This will
keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than
using a clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next have the tow
vehicle backup, leaving two to three feet worth of slack
in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using light throttle,
should accelerate tightening the strap providing the
pulling force needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle
being recovered should assist in the recovery, at the time
of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in the same
direction as the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle
should signal they are free and should hit their brakes
stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pulling vehicle
should let off the throttle without using the brakes, once
signaled by the other driver. This sequence is important
to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps
with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could
become projectiles if a strap breaks, which could cause
severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to 3 feet (.6 to 1
meter) of slack in the strap. More slack than this
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage.
Always keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters) away
from a strapping or winching situation.
• Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Additional
Information) – Winching is most commonly used in the
following situations: there is no support vehicle available, a
high controlled force is required to recover the vehicle,
there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or
where nothing else seems to work. A winch can deliver a
high pulling force with a great deal of control. It allows you
to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow controlled
manner. This control works well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Once you decide it is time to use the winch
look for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong enough
to hold more than the vehicle’s weight and provide a
direction of pull as straight as possible. Use block and tackle
if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the
winch’s pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use a strap
around its base and hook the cable to the strap. If it is
another vehicle, then place that vehicle in PARK and block
the front tires. If you cannot find an anchor point within
reach try using your spare tire by burying it. Once you have
determined an anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring
there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum, and
place a floor mat or something else over the strung out
cable. Placing something over the strung out cable helps
keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place the
vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle as you
power the winch in. Be careful not to allow slack in the
cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try to guide the
cable into the drum. If it starts to bunch up on one end, let
it. You can re-spool the cable afterwards. Never use a winch
cable as a tow strap and always stand back while winching.
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over or
straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload the
winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle while
winching. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in serious or fatal injury.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on
snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is
a difference between the traction characteristics of the
surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces,
however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the rear wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will
supply maximum traction. When starting with only one
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary
to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose control
of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause
both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions
should be observed:
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
Flowing/Rising Water
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
WARNING!
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
handling.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills
or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift
to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly
to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
WARNING! (Continued)
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY (IF
EQUIPPED)
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire
rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By
nature, a winch is capable of generating very high forces
and should be used with care. Do not operate the winch
without reading and understanding the complete winch
owner’s manual.
Tensioning The Wire Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the
winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
5
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required
to tension the wire rope.
3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
neatly wound onto the drum.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
winch.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out for
30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
recover before continuing to winch.
Winch Motor Thermal Protection
Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in
the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive
duration, the device may interrupt motor function to
protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will
power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor to
cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The
winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch
5
Winch Components
1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system and features a thermal protection
switch that automatically stops motor function in the
power-in direction if the motor gets too hot.
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote
control to be attached to the control pack to allow the
winch to function.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and
transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the
winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.
4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between
speed and pulling power.
5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be
connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum to
be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire
rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the interface between the winch operator and the winch. The
remote control provides the ability to power the winch
in, out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the
toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in
and up to power the winch out. The winch will stop if
the switch is left in the neutral (center) position.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and
minimizes damage to the rope.
Winch Accessories
The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch
to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe winching.
Gloves: Wire rope, through use,
will develop ⬙barbs⬙ which can
slice skin. It is extremely important to wear protective gloves
while operating the winch or
handling the wire rope. Avoid
loose fitting clothes or anything
that could become entangled in
the wire rope and other moving
parts.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used
properly, the multi-purpose
snatch block allows you to (1)
increase the winch’s pulling
power; and (2) change your
pulling direction without damaging the wire rope. Proper use
of the snatch block is covered in
⬙Before You Pull.⬙
Clevis/D-Shackles:
The
D-Shackle is a safe means of
connecting the looped ends of
cables, straps and snatch
blocks. The shackle’s pin is
threaded to allow easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically
made of tough, high-quality nylon, it provides the operator an
attachment point for the winch
rope to a wide variety of anchor
points and objects, as well as
protect living trees.
5
Operating Your Winch
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
• Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
• Never use as a hoist.
• Never use to move persons.
• Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.
• Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the wire rope.
(Continued)
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or
under load.
• Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under
load, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope drum is
moving.
• Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep
others away during winching.
• Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire
rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation
and when spooling.
• Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use a
choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk protector on the anchor.
• Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
• Never use ⴖbungeeⴖ straps that develop tremendous
and potentially dangerous amounts of force when
stretched.
• Always disconnect the remote control when not in
use.
• Never winch when there are less than five wraps of
wire rope around the winch drum.
• Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, when using remote
inside a vehicle.
• Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
(Continued)
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
points to remember when using your winch are:
• Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
• Always take your time when using a winch.
• Use the right equipment for the situation.
• Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire rope
to slip through your hands when handling the rope.
• Only the operator should handle the wire rope and
remote control.
• Think safety at all times.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
CAUTION!
• Always Know Your Winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch and
the winching operation.
• Always inspect winch installation and wire rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced
immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation
must be corrected immediately.
• Always be sure any element which can interfere with
safe winching operations is removed prior to initiating winching.
• Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
wire rope and rigging.
• Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
• Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for
proper snugness.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear or damage.
5
Winch Rope
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Put on gloves.
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the winch
drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to disengage.
Freespooling conserves battery power.
Hook Strap
Free Spool
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free the
winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook strap
to the hook (if not attached).
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire
rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a
certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become
twisted and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to
wire rope damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the
hook strap while you work.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
5
Pulling Wire Rope
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established
your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
choker-chain around the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand
the load.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor
is critical to winching operations. An anchor must be
strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors
include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as
possible. If no natural anchors are available when recovering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor point.
In this case, be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL,
apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want an anchor point
that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the
vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope to wind tightly
and evenly onto the spooling drum. An anchor point as far
away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest
pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain
and through the hook loop, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
Clevis/D-Shackles
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the
remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you
choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle,
always pass the remote through a window to avoid
pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the
remote control when not in use.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
5
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
Pulling Wire Rope Under Tension
10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote control
switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack
remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand
well clear of it and never step over it.
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.
12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
can cause damage to the wire rope.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
or remove the blanket, slack the tension on the wire rope
first.
13. Establish ⴖno peopleⴖ zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely
aware of your intentions before you pull. Declare
where the spectators should not stand - never behind
or in front of the vehicle and never near the wire rope
or snatch block. Your situation may have other ⴖno
peopleⴖ zones.
Wire Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum
In certain situations you may
decide to throw a heavy blanket
or similar object over the wire
rope. A heavy blanket can absorb energy should the wire
rope break. Place it on the wire
rope midway between the
winch and the anchor point. Do
this before the wire rope is put
under tension. Do not approach
or move the blanket once tension is applied. Do not allow
it to get pulled into the fairlead. If it is necessary to move
No People Zones
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine on
and light tension already on the wire rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire
rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling
drum. For additional assistance, the winched vehicle
can be slowly driven while being pulled by the winch.
Continue pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground.
If you are able to drive the vehicle, the winching
operation is complete.
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
• Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
winch motor to cool down.
• What to look for under load: The wire rope must
always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum
rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make
sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from drawing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the
wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock
loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire
rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to
stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become
large enough to cause serious damage to the winch. So,
line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or
mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that
section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end
of the drum, which will free up space for continued
winching.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
15. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is complete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and shift
the transmission to PARK. Release tension in the wire
rope.
16. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the
anchor.
17. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire
rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide
through the hand, control the winch at all times.
Rewinding The Wire Rope
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote
control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. Arrange
the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled. Be
sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound
tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer
if necessary. Keep the wire rope under light tension and
spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even
layers. Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers
as necessary. Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
same distance as the full length of the remote control from
the winch. Pinch the hook between your thumb and
forefinger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook strap
between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the
wire rope. Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope. By pulsing the
remote control switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow
hook.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
straight-line pulling situation. You will have to assess what
technique is correct for your situation. Think ⬙safety⬙ at all
times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
5
Hook In Stored Position
19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote
control cord from the control box and store in a clean
and dry place. Winching operations are now complete.
Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
Rigging Techniques
Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from too
little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line
rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a
Change Pulling Directions
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
All winching operations should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch block,
secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable
you to change your pulling direction while still allowing
the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly onto the
spooling drum.
Double Line
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more pulling
power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical
advantage and that increases your pulling power.
Wire Rope Routing
Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers
of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a snatch block
to double line out more wire rope. This decreases the
number of layers of wire rope on the drum, and increases
pulling power. Start by feeding out enough wire rope to
free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your vehicle’s
frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through a snatch
block. Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch block,
pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point. Do not
attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure to the anchor
point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends of
the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten (tighten
and back-off 1/2 turn).
POWER STEERING
Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over
temperature condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER
STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed the instrument cluster screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check — 2500/3500 Models
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
BRAKE SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated
brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still
function. However, you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still function
with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation
of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only
(Except Power Wagon)
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydroboost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
operating temperature.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon
as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if equipped).
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
NOTE: During HDC, the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC, the
transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected
set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about
the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its
load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed
limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire
pressures can cause steering problems. You could
lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Always
drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Loading
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s Information kit.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
5
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Tread Wear
CAUTION!
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING! (Continued)
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
WARNING!
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
(Continued)
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
(Continued)
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style.
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
Life Of Tire
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting
in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and
stress to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain
type, and axle recommendations:
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicle
1500 Models
2500 Models
Axle Recommendations
Rear Only
Rear Only
2500 Power Wagon Models
3500 (Single Rear Wheel)
Models
3500 (Dual Rear Wheel)
Models
Rear Only
Rear Only
Front/Rear
Tire Sizes
P265/70R17
LT245/70R17E
LT265/70R18E
LT275/70R18E
LT285/70R17D
LT265/70R18E
LT275/70R18E
LT235/80R17E
Chain Class
S Class
U Class
U Class
U Class
U Class
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
5
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
Tire Rotation
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Directional Tires — If Equipped
For the R/T package with 22” tires and wheels, the
rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consideration when rotating the tires. The recommended rotation
pattern for directional tires is shown below.
Tire Rotation
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS):
Tire Rotation
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all four
tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
• The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses
unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify
them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the
inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched.
• After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the
system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID.
Auto learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ignition status is changed from Off to On and speeds of
greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period.
You may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower
speeds and stops.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
• If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto localization
of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting
in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
CAUTION!
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
• 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the
asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/OffRoad tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL)
tires.
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be
remounted on the rim, or installed at a different
location, to maintain the correct placement of the tire
on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on
the truck. For example, if the spare is used to replace
an outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the
rim so that the wheel is dished inward. That way the
tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white
writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper position.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30
psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the
tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be
ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
(Continued)
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the instrument cluster
• TPM Telltale Light
5
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed.
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to it’s original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or Compact
Spare
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire
does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size
spare or compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
• If you install the non matching full size spare or compact
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light and a “LOW TIRE”
message will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a pressure value in a different color.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching
full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will
turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -). The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500
Series Trucks
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS).
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applications)
• Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications)
• Pressure display in the instrument cluster
The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications) tire pressure values in the instrument cluster
display.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will
no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display
in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any
of the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS
210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any
benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
This engines is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance
and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
6.4L Engine
This engines is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number
range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane
“Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance
and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause
the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
• Operate in a lean mode.
• Poor engine performance.
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Materials Added To Fuel
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline
is
recommended.
Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible
Fuel powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Starting
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as Mopar Injector Cleanup or Techron may be
used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC
engines.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine to
start under cold conditions, may affect drivability, and
could cause engine damage.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler
door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and
remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-clockwise.
5
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
(Continued)
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
Static electricity can cause an ignition of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce
risk of serious injury or death when filling containers:
• Always place container on the ground before filling.
• Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container
when you are filling it.
• Use only approved containers for flammable liquid.
• Do not leave container unattended while filling.
• A static electric charge could cause a spark and fire
hazard.
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the instrument cluster telltale display
area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
TRAILER TOWING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more,
it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Trailer Sway Control
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The trailer sway control is supported by a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch
receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING! (Continued)
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition
of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively
to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended
for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required
depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to
comply with GAWR requirements.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
Towing With 1500 Air Suspension
1. Set air suspension to normal ride height. No action is
required if already in normal ride height.
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for proper
leveling of the air suspension system.
5
2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer
(do not connect the trailer).
3. Under the instrument cluster or touch screen radio
settings, enable jack mode. Jack mode will be canceled
and procedure must be restarted if the vehicle is driven
at speeds above 5mph (8 kmh).
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
6. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
Measuring Height (H)
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
3+H1 (about 1/3 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Use the instrument cluster or touch screen radio settings
and switch off tire jack mode. Make sure the truck
returns to normal ride height. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight distributing hitch to
confirm manufacturers’ recommendations have been
met.
NOTE: Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain in the
engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper
leveling of the air suspension system. It may not be
possible to enter Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) while
lightly loaded.
9. The truck can now be driven.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
Measurement Example
H1
H2
H2-H1
(H2-H1)/3
(H2-H1)/3 + H1
Example 1500 Height
(mm)
925
946
21
7
932
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer
(do not connect the trailer).
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommendations have been met.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Measurement Example
H1
H2
H2-H1
(H2-H1)/2
(H2-H1)/2 + H1
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
1030
1058
28
14
1044
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
Towing With All Other 1500/2500/3500 (Non-Air Suspension)
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer
(do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing
bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that
the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Preform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommendations have been met.
Measurement Example
H1
H2
H2-H1
(H2-H1)/2
(H2-H1)/2 + H1
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
1030
1058
28
14
1044
NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with tow haul mode engaged.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer
with a coupling king pin.
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Your truck may be equipped with a 5th wheel hitch option.
Refer to the separately provided 5th wheel hitch safety,
care, assembly, and operating instructions.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and
should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer
hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type
Max. Trailer Weight / Max.
Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) / 500 lbs
Hitch - 1500 Model
(226 kg)
Class IV - 1500 Model
11,000 lbs (4,989 kg) / 1100
lbs (498 kg)
Class V - 2500/3500
18,000 lbs (8,164 kg) / 1800
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Models
lbs (816 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 2500
25,000 lbs (11,339 kg) / 5000
Model
lbs (2,267 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500
20,000 lbs (9,071 kg) /
Model
4000 lbs (1,814 kg)
Gooseneck Or Fifth
32,000 lbs (14,545 kg) / 6000
Wheel - 3500 Model
lbs (2,721 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch or the weights specified in the information that can be found under “Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)”.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factoryinstalled options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading
Information Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
(Continued)
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always block
or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (749 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module
(ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH)
trailer brakes.
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM.
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the
tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN
setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased
to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for
the specific towing condition and should be changed as
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted.
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections
according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not
recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the
correct type of trailer must be selected from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on
the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just
below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the
maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Type of Trailer Brakes
Light Electric
Electric Trailer Brakes
Heavy Electric
Electric Trailer Brakes
Load
*Under 10,000 lbs
*Above 10,000 lbs
* The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road
state may also affect the selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Light EOH
Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes
*Under 10,000 lbs
Heavy EOH
Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes
*Above 10,000 lbs
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
NOTE:
• An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake
systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with your
trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause
damage to the electrical system and electronic modules
of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic.
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode
or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control).
NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low
speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your vehicle
in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid
transmission overheating.
If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of
continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing (6-speed automatic only).
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly
areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle,
the air suspension system can be used. Refer to “Air
Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the
air suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in
the front end structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual.
2500/3500 Models Only
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option. These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current Body
Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or
snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are
unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.
WARNING!
• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ in (6 cm to 1.2 cm)
above ground in snow plowing position.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and functioning properly.
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Builders
Guide.
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck should
not exceed two.
CAUTION!
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior
lamps are not properly installed.
Before Plowing
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR
should never be exceeded.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings.
These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label on the driver’s side door opening.
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications
at the factory without consideration for the weight of the
plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset if
necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce
speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar
areas or under poor visibility.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equipment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain
damage, the following precautions should be observed.
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator should
• Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed
15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4HI.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4LO
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the
transmission.
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
The Ground
NONE
Dolly Tow
Front
On Trailer
Rear
ALL
Two-Wheel
Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in PARK
• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in
Transport mode before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Air Suspension – If Equipped” for more information. If the vehicle
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the
axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss
of proper tie-down tension.
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in
NEUTRAL).
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing,
to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may
leak from the transmission, causing damage to internal parts.
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer
cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational
towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into
PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions must
be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational
towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
• Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be
in NEUTRAL. To be certain the transfer case is fully
in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined under
“Shifting Into NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission
damage will result, if the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL during towing.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK,
and manual transmissions must be placed in gear
(not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid
will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to
internal parts.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or
manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
5. With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case
lever into NEUTRAL (N).
• With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models
have a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be pushed using a
ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a
rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed
and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
no vehicle movement.
• Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the
parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically select
PARK when the engine is turned off.
12. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle the
ignition to the RUN mode and back to the OFF mode.
Remove the key fob from the ignition.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine
should be started and left running for a minimum of 60
seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24
hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust
the vehicle’s ride height to compensate for temperature
effects.
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case
lever to the desired position.
• With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector
switch, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL
(N) button has been released, the transfer case will
shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
• With electronic shift transfer case with push-button
selector switch, push and hold the switch for the
desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N)
indicator light turns off and the desired position
indicator light turns on.
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N),
turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be helpful
to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmission, the engine must remain running, since turning the
engine OFF will shift the transmission to PARK (and the
transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to
shift out of NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into
PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual
transmission).
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal
(and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check
that the vehicle operates normally.
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:
• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before
pushing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and
must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before
pushing the button or are no longer met during the shift,
the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the button is
released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .563
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING. . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks . .565
▫ Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series
Trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
䡵 HOISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . . .603
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Column Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Center Console Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . . .604
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .610
6
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper
switch bank just below the radio.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
• On the highways — slow down.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176
N·m)
140 Ft-Lbs (190
N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
22 mm
Flanged
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
6
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The
lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two drops
of oil at the interface between the lug nut/bolt and the
washer.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Two-Piece Lug Nut
Do not oil wheel studs.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks
WARNING!
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
6
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, there is a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled to assist with changing a tire.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature
can be activated through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this
feature can be activated through the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the front passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the
cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release
a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the
assembly out from under the seat.
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove tools
from bag.
6
Jack And Tool Bag
Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Extension 1
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Wheel Wrench
CAUTION!
• The wheel wrench can only be attached to extension
3.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 1 is
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
• Damage to the wheel wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
Assembled For Jack Operation
WARNING! (Continued)
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension
tube with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between
the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Extension With Jack Hook
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Wheel Wrench
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
(Continued)
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Inserting The Jack Extension Tube Into The Access Hole
Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack
to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
6
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
Gaining Access To The Retainer
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
Jack Instructions (1500 Series)
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
6
Jack Warning Label
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Placement of the jack:
4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
4X2 Front Jacking Location Indicator
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under
the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
6
4X2 Front Jacking Location
4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the
lower control arm.
4X4 Front Jacking Location Indicator
When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under
the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4X4 Front Jacking Location
4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension may be used but is not
required.
For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel,
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.
Rear Jacking Location
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
until the wheel just clears the surface.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
WARNING!
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle unstable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always
stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the
places provided.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped
end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. To avoid the
risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by you authorized dealer or
service station.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
6
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot
be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will
not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure the flat tire in
the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
Reinstalling The Retainer
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
6
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
Wheel Wrench And Jack Extension Tube Assembled And
In Position
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate
and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.
4. Rotate the wheel wrench handle clockwise until the
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several times to
ensure it is firmly in place.
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench
is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
6
Jack And Tools Tied
Jack Hold Down Fastener
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor.
NOTE: Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down
location.
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series
Trucks
WARNING!
Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the
assembly out from under the seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools (2500, 3500 Series)
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove the
plastic access cover located on the side of the front passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the
cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release
a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
6
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
Jack Access Cover
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly. Turn
the jack-turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack from
bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Extension 1
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Wheel Wrench
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
CAUTION!
• The wheel wrench can only be attached to extension 3.
• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 1 is
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
• Damage to the wheel wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly.
6
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Extension With Jack Hook
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Wheel Wrench
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or
sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects
in the vehicle may move around with force, resulting
in serious injury.
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension
tube with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between
the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack
to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle
Inserting The Jack Extension Tube Into The Access Hole
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
6
Gaining Access To The Retainer
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable.
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
Jack Instructions (2500, 3500 Series)
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
6
Jack Warning Label
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel
covers they must be removed before raising the vehicle off
the ground. Refer to ”Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If
Equipped” in this section.
Lug Wrench Adaptor Shown In Jack And Tools Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing a
dually tire requires the lug wrench adapter.
Lug Wrench Adapter
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
Front Jacking Location
When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension
tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as
possible with the drive tubes extending to the front.
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
6
Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
3. Placement of the jack:
Front Jacking Location
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube
to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube.
Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the
shock absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack
drive tube in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle unstable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
Rear Jacking Location
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. On single
rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel and
wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts
toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models
(DRW) trucks, if the outer tire is being replaced then
leave the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner wheel
is being replaced remove the outer wheel and replace
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
the inner wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts. To
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been
lowered.
6
Dual Rear Wheel Placement
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement (Dual Rear Wheel
Equipped)
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by you authorized dealer or
service station.
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always
stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the
places provided.
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop
could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the
ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack
drive tube in order to lower the jack.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Reinstalling The Retainer
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with
the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate
and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.
6
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
Wheel Wrench And Jack Extension Tube Assembled And
In Position
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Rotate the wheel wrench handle clockwise until the
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several times to
ensure it is firmly in place.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (2500 And 3500
Series)
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly. Make
sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack
turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips. Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn the jackturn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into bracket
assembly.
Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the
jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot
engages into the fastener on the floor.
6
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
Jack Hold Down Fastener
NOTE: Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly
slides into the front hold down location.
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.
Reinstall the plastic cover.
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear
center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap and/or
the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A pulling
motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to
remove the caps.
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat blade on
the end of the lug wrench to pull the hub cap off. Insert the
blade end into the pull off notch and carefully pull the hub
cap off with a back and forth motion.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pull off notch of the rear
hub caps. Position the hook and pull straight out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel skins
can now be removed. For the front hub cap, use the flat
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the caps off. The
wheel skin can now be removed.
CAUTION!
• Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not
use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap,
damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
pull off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pull off the
wheel skins. Locate the hub cap pull notches (2 notches on
each cap). Insert the flat tip completely and using a back
and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut
bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber
mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly
seated around the wheel.
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations.
However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on
any other parts of the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jumpstarting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only
jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+)
symbol on or around the post.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Correct Positive Jumping Location
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the
positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
6
602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND
GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
6
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the
following procedures to temporarily move the gear selector:
Column Shifter — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column, and
push and hold the override release lever up.
Gear Selector Override Access Port
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Center Console Shifter — If Equipped
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
gear selector override access cover (located to the right
of the gear selector).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
down.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
6
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual
Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle of
the lever) to the right.
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward,
until it locks in place pointing towards the driver’s seat.
Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park
Release lever is locked in the released position.
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
Manual Park Release Pull Strap
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above
the parking brake release handle, below and to the left
of the steering column.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its
original position, until the locking tab snaps into place
to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever
is locked in its stowed position.
4. Re-install the access cover.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to ⬙Air
Suspension⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened
to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these
instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause
loss of proper tie-down tension.
6
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift
Or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheels
OFF The
Ground
NONE
2WD Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed
transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed
transmission)
Front
Rear
OK
ALL
BEST METHOD
4WD Models
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT
NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ”Manual Park Release” or “Gear
Selector Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on
the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)
for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8-speed
transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km) for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km)
for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
(for automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information and detailed instructions.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
6
610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .625
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . .615
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . . .616
▫ Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . .633
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . . .672
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
▫ Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And
Turn — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Fog Lamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps .669
▫ Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS .676
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Coolant Pressure Cap
Engine Coolant Reservoir
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick (6-Speed Trans Only)
— Engine Oil Fill
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (2500/3500 Models Only)
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Coolant Pressure Bottle
Transmission Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Oil Dipstick
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Battery
7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8 — Washer Solvent
9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
10 — Air Cleaner Filter
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the instrument cluster telltale display
area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the SELECT
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom
of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the
safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
2500 – 3500 Models Only
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engines (1500 Models
Only)
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is
recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine
oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
(1500/2500/3500 Models)
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 6.4L Engine
Use Mopar SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra equivalent
is recommended for all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change
your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
7
3.6L/5.7L Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6.4L Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Spring Clips
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
• Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
7
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
(Continued)
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
(Continued)
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If
Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection
Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP
(Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment door
and release into dash panel.
7
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides
of the glove compartment door, push inward on both
sides of the glove compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
4. Disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges
by opening the glove compartment past the travel stop
and pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger tabs
on each end of the filter cover.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
Filter Cover
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
7
Finger Tabs
Finger Tab
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.
Glove Compartment Installation
Cabin Air Filter
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, press on each end until you hear an audible click.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove
compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on the
glove compartment sides.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change.
7
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and
sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
Front Drive Shaft Double Cardan Joint
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The grease fitting is located at the rear of the front
driveshaft, near the centering mechanism of double cardan
joint. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. Use Mopar Type MS-6560 (lithiumbased grease), or equivalent.
Double Cardan Joint
1 — Double Cardan Joint
2 — Grease Fitting
3 — Exploded View – Grease Fitting
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
Windshield Wiper Blades
• Hardening Or Cracking
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
• Deformation Or Fatigue
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
Windshield Wiper Arm
Wiper Locking Assembly
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm
and use one finger push the release tab toward the
wiper arm.
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from
the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
7
Wiper Disengaging
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to
avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Adding Washer Fluid
Exhaust System
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by
an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and
snap it into its locked position.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator is hot.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation
of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L and 5.7L Engines
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE range on
the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
7
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Opening The Coolant Reservoir
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir
neck.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the
bottle when the engine is cold.
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine
coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant
freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month. When additional
engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” mark and a “MIN” mark. The fluid level must be
kept within these two marks. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be 1/4
in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the 9.25
in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on 10.5 in
rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4
in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. This inspection
should be made with the vehicle in a level position.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with
the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge
of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear
axle.
1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip
Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information. The Mopar Limited Slip
Limited-Slip Differentials
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Additive should be added to the gear lubricant whenever
a fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a Limited
Slip Differential.
2500/3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited
slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE: When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive), the Limited Slip Additive should be added before the gear lubricant is added to insure proper additive fill.
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug.
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler
plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C).
This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot
be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read
the transmission sump temperature in the instrument
cluster screen (refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for
further information).
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the instrument cluster display, and operate the vehicle as required
to reach the normal operating temperature. If the transmission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle
cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below
about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this
procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if
the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes
on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to
bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY
the specified fluid (see ⬙Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts⬙ for fluid specifications). After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of
two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with
the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD region
of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid
level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check
the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmission reaches normal operating temperature.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50 °F (10 °C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the
temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate
reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the
fluid.
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal
for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully
seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed Transmission
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter(s) if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion?
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
Special Care
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Glass Surfaces
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Seat Belt Maintenance
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft
cloth until all residue is removed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On Bedliner
Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft
cloth or brush.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau
cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and
wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over
time.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse
all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become slippery and may result in personal injury.
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil, hydraulic
fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs on your
Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
to avoid permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On
Bedliner. One common condition is when loading a heavy
pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed.
If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by
your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the
metal exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear or
gouge, follow the directions provided in the Mopar Quick
Repair Kit.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
7
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity
F01
F03
F05
Cartridge Fuse
80 Amp Black
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
F06
40 Amp Green
–
F07
40 Amp Green
–
Description
Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped
Rad Fan – If Equipped
Compressor for Air Suspension – If
Equipped
Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Pump
Starter Solenoid
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F08
Micro Fuse
–
Description
Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
–
Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F10
F10
Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue (1500
LD/Cummins Diesel)
40 Amp Green (Special Services Vehicle
& Cummins Diesel)
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
–
–
F11
30 Amp Pink
–
F12
F13
F14
F16
F19
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue (1500
LD Diesel)
30 Amp Pink (Cummins Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If
Equipped with Stop/Start
Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If
Equipped
Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
Blower Motor
Body Controller #4 / Interior Lighting
Smart Bar – If Equipped
SCR – If Equipped
–
–
Passenger Door Module
Drive Train Control Module
F09
F20
F21
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
Cavity
F22
Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink (Cummins Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
Description
Engine Control Module
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
F32
F33
F34
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink (1500
LD Diesel)
–
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting
Driver Door Module
Front Wiper
Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module /
Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle
Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
–
–
–
F35
F36
F37
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
F23
F24
F25
F26
F28
F29
F30
F31
Spare Fuse
Special Services Vehicle Only
Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If
Equipped
Sunroof – If Equipped
Rear Defroster – If Equipped
Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If
Equipped
7
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F38
F39
F41
F42
F44
F46
F49
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F50
–
20 Amp Yellow
F51
–
10 Amp Red
F52
F53
F54
F56
F57
F58
F59
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
Description
Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped
Power Outlet – Special Services Only
Active Grill Shutter – If Equipped
Horn
Diagnostic Port
Upfitter – If Equipped
Instrument Panel Cluster (Except Fleet Vehicles)
Air Suspension Control Module – If
Equipped
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition
(Instrument Panel Cluster – Fleet Vehicles
Only)
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
Adjustable Pedals
Additional Diesel Content – If Equipped
Transmission
Spare Fuse
SCR Relay – If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
Cavity
F60
F61
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
F62
F63
–
–
Micro Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red (1500
LD Diesel & Cummins Diesel)
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
F64
F65
F66
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
10 Amp Red
F67
–
10 Amp Red
F69
–
15 Amp Blue
F70
F71
F72
F73
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Green
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Underhood Lamp
PM Sensor – If Equipped
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins
Diesel)
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
Spare Fuse
Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches /
Rain Sensor
CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module –
If Equipped
Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If
Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Amplifier
PCM – If Equipped
Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If
Equipped
7
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F74
Cartridge Fuse
–
F75
F76
F77
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow (Gas
Engine & 1500 LD
Diesel)
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F78
–
10 Amp Red
F79
F80
F81
F82
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F84
F85
F86
F87
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F88
–
15 Amp Blue
Description
Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If
Equipped
Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering
Clearance Lights
Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module / Cruise
Control
Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow
/ Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
Cavity
F90/F91
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
F93
F94
F95
F96
F97
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Clear
F98
F99
F100
F101
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F104
–
20 Amp Yellow
CAUTION!
Description
Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Selectable
Cigar Lighter
Shifter / Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera / Park Assist
Rear Seat Heater Switch
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel
– If Equipped
Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
Climate Control
Upfitters – If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams
– If Equipped
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center
Console)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
(Continued)
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
(Continued)
7
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps
TS 212–9
Dome Lamp
7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad Headlamp –
Low Beam
Base Quad Headlamp –
High Beam
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Base Quad Headlamp)
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - Low
Beam
Bulb Number
H11LL
9005LL
3157NA
9005Sl+
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - High
Beam
Front Turn Signal Lamp
(Premium Headlamp)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal
shape)
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape)
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear Cargo Lamp
LED Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp
Cab Roof Marker Lamps
Base Rear Tail/Turn and
Stop Lamp
Premium Rear Tail/Turn
and Stop Lamp
Premium Backup Lamp
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker
Bulb Number
9005LL
LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
9145
Bulb Number
Lamp
Side Marker Lamps (Dual
Rear Wheels)
Backup Lamp
Rear License Plate Lamp
194
921
194
BULB REPLACEMENT
9006
921K
921
LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
194NA
3157K
LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
7440/W21W
194
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And
Turn — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure the
upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender
ledges.
7
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash
shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to
disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
lamp unit housing.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws.
Slide Lock
Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
access hole.
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the
lamp wiring.
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheet
metal.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb
access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb
has been replaced.
7
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from
the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
Tail Lamp Screw Locations
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough
to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of
the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side panel.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the
body as shown.
Pulling Out The Tail Lamp
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb
socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring
harness to the body.
7
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
CHMSL Connector Location
3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp
2. Rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lamp
assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
7
Removing The Bulb From The Bulb Socket
Screw Locations
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
2. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access to
the bulb sockets.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
3. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise and remove
from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
Side Marker Lamp Locations
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional)
U.S.
Metric
26 Gallons
32 Gallons
98 Liters
121 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
2500/3500 Shortbed Models
2500/3500 Longbed Models
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil meeting
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.)
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
6.4 Liter Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use Mopar
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
U.S.
31 Gallons
32 Gallons
Metric
117 Liters
121 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
13.7 Quarts
13 Liters
18.3 Quarts
17.3 Liters
18.3 Quarts
17.3 Liters
16.6 Quarts
15.7 Liters
7
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine
oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
Component
Engine Oil – 6.4L
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine – If Equipped
Fuel Selection – 5.7L/6.4L Engines
CAUTION!
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or
equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
We recommend you use Mopar brand Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic
Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed Automatic with Gasoline Engine (For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supplement)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission
Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect
the function or performance of your transmission.
Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to
use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
Component
Transfer Case
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive Models
Rear Axle – 1500 Models
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir – 2500/3500 Models
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar BW44–44 Transfer Case
Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant
SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require
the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar Limited Slip Additive
(MS-10111).
We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5
Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip additive is not
required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4 or
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
8
682 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
1500 Models Only
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
2500 – 3500 Models Only
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
NOTE: Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the
vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominantly at idle, or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 683
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering (2500/3500 Models
Only) and automatic transmission (six-speed only) and
fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages
for required maintenance.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4)
models only).
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
1500 Models:
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing, change axle fluid.
2500/3500 Models:
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing, change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
684 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Adjust parking brake as necessary.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter.
Replace engine air filter.
Replace spark plugs. **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s) (six-speed automatic only), if using your vehicle
for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter(s) (six-speed automatic only).
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 685
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
686 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Inspect the transfer case fluid,
change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
Change the transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .689
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .691
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .689
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .689
9
688 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 689
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
690 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 691
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
9
692 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
10
694 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 117
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 117
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 609
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 235
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .622
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 628
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .336, 338
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321, 335, 627
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 429
Alarm, Panic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 240
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641, 674
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .335
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 651
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649, 651
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648, 649
INDEX 695
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648, 678
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 390
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647, 678
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 626
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Body Builders Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646, 678
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479, 645
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 238
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666, 667
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 666
Cab Top Clearance Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 526
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .617
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 83
10
696 INDEX
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .80
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . .73
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .70
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Climate Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640, 643, 644
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 644
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .641, 674, 676
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 258, 259
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Dipsticks
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
INDEX 697
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Driving
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 563
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . .401, 406, 412, 417
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Electronic Range Select (ERS). . . . . . . . . . . .378, 385, 395
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .149
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .242
Emergency Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .617
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614, 615
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . .613, 614, 615
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 526
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 674
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 674, 676
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620, 674
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
10
698 INDEX
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .65, 609
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524, 527
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 526
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 638
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 628
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 676
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 142, 257
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578, 594
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 669
Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524, 527
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 676
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 674
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
INDEX 699
Fuel, Flexible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .170, 175
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531, 617
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381, 390
Gear Select Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Or Shallow Standing
. . . . . . . . . . . . .456
. . . . . . . . . . . . .562
. . . . . . . . . . . . .667
. . . . . . . . . . . . .134
. . . . . . . . . . . . .655
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .143
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Head Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 195
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . .143
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 15
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 107
10
700 INDEX
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240, 257
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Instrument Panel And Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565, 582
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .25
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .22
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 368
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 306
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . .35, 286, 306
Keyless Entry System . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer).
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.22
.19
.11
.18
Lane Change And Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 666
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 133
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 235
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236, 238
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 169
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 258, 259
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
INDEX 701
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 669
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 140, 169
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .244
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666, 667
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .247, 516
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 142, 257, 667, 669
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .240, 257
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454, 647
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .244, 617
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Memory Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
10
702 INDEX
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 107
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618, 691
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 458
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 458
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619, 676
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622, 676
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620, 674
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 674
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387, 396
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387, 396
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .4, 691
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 160
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
INDEX 703
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200, 202, 217
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . .497, 498
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . .179, 184
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475, 476
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 117
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 117
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Programmable Electronic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Programming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . .640, 642
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 28, 31, 38
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Rain Sensitive Wiper System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Ramp Travel Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 160
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 123
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Reclining Rear Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .556
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .558
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
10
704 INDEX
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Keyless Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 23
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .318
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . .288, 308
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 308
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . .48
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 94
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . . .48
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 46
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
INDEX 705
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115, 117, 121
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 115, 117
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 123
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 240
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 380, 390
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral
(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral
(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 142, 257
Siri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Sliding Rear Window
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506, 507, 508
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 367
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475, 476
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
10
706 INDEX
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .318
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336, 666
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Suspension, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 429
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .335
Tilt
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . .497, 498
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 502, 506, 515
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 502
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 563
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502, 506
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 499
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492, 502
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506, 508
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 397
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
INDEX 707
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533, 607
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . .401, 406, 412, 417
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 380, 390, 648
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 257, 667, 669
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .288, 308
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288, 308
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . .35, 286, 306
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . .35, 286, 306
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286, 306
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . .171, 172, 173, 174
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
10
708 INDEX
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 531
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336, 666
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 638
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 179
Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 144, 638
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 638
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
17D241-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
thirD Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement